LG | GU285 | Owner's Manual | LG GU285 Owner's manual

LG GU285 Owner's manual
P/N : MMBB0353920 (1.0) G
‫ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬GU285
ELECTRONICS INC.
www.lgmobile.com
GU285 ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬
GU285 User Guide
www.lgmobile.com
P/N : MMBB0353920 (1.0) G
Bluetooth QD ID B015843
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻬﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ GU285‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ،LG‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤّﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ‪8............‬‬
‫‪ 01‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮّﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ‪15........‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‪16..........‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪17........‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪20.............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪20...................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪20....................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪20....................‬‬
‫‪ 02‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ‪21...........‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪21...........................‬‬
‫‪ 03‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪22.................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪22..........................‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‪22.............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ ‪22............‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪22.......................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪23............‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪24.............‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪24..............‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪25.............‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪25.......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ‪27...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ‪27.........................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪27.............‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪27..............‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪28................‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪28......................... USIM‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪29...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪29................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪29..........................‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪30...........................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪30.................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪30...............‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪30..........................‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪31......................‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪31..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ‪32........................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪33.......‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪33.......................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪34.....‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪35..............‬‬
‫‪ 04‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‪44.................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪44.................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪44.................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪45..........................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪45..........................‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪45...........................‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪46..................‬‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ‪46................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪46........................‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪46...........................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪47...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣُﺸ ّﻐﻞ ‪47‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ‪47.....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻲ ‪48......‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪48..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪49.......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪49....................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‪49.............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪36...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪36..................‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ‪36....................‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪37....................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪38...................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪38.............‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﺳﻢ ‪38............................‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪39............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ‪39.....................‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪39......................‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪39.........‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪40......‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪41.................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪41.......................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪41.............‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪43...........................‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ 05 43...............‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‪50....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪43.................‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪50...............‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ‪43.................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪50......................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ‪51...............‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ‪ 07 51....................‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ‪51..........................‬‬
‫ﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪51.......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪52....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪52........................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒّﻪ ‪52............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪52.......................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪53................‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‪53........................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ‪53.....‬‬
‫‪ 06‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ‪54..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪54.....................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ‪54....................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ‪55...........................RSS‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪55............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪55.........‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‪55...........‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ‪55..............‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪56.................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪56........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻋﺎﺿﻮﻻﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪56......‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪56.................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ‪57.............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪57................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪57.................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪58....................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪58...................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪59.................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪59......‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪60......... Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺁﺧﺮ‪60...‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ‪61 Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ‪61...................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪62..........................Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪63.................. USB‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ‪63.....................‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪-‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻛﻤﻮﺩﻡ‪63..........................‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻛﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ‪64.............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪PC-‬‬
‫‪64.................................Suite‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪67.................‬‬
‫‪ 08‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‪68..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪69...........................‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ ‪69....................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ‪69.............‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﺪ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻣﺮﺍً ﺧﻄﺮﺍً‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮّﺽ ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻘﻴّﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮّﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗ ّﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺼﻨﻴﻌﻪ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ّ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴّﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻳﻨﺔ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺟﺰءًﺍ ﻣﻦ‬
‫)‪.(ICNIRP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺤ ّﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺃﻥ ّ‬
‫ﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺎﻣّﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ‪ .‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗ ّﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﻴّﺔ ّ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ ﻭﺻﺎﺭﻡ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴّﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺗ ّﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﻢ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻓﻬﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴّﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ّ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗُﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﻌ ّﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ‪ .SAR‬ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺣ ّﺪ‬
‫‪ SAR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ‪ 2.0‬ﻭﺍﻁ‪ /‬ﻛﻠﻎ*‪ .‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺟﺮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌ ّﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴّﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺟﺮﻯ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ّ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌ ّﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻗﺪ ﺗ ّﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ّ‬
‫ﺇﻻ ّ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ‪ SAR‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ّ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤ ّﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﺮ ّﺩ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﻤّﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺘﻌ ّﺪﺩﺓ ﻹﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺒﻠﻮﻍ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴّﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎً‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺃﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ .(R&TTE‬ﻭﻳﻨﻄﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴّﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺻﺤﺔ ﻭﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺟﺮﻯ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ‪ 1.00‬ﻭﺍﻁ‪/‬ﻛﻠﻎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻘﻴّﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺈﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫‪ 1.5‬ﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﺪﻥ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 1.5‬ﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺴﻤﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠّﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻ ﻧﻮﻋﻴًّﺎ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ّ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳُﺼﺒﺢ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠّﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘ ّﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺟﺮﻯ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬
‫‪ 1.08‬ﻭﺍﻁ‪/‬ﻛﻠﻎ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺣ ّﺪ ‪ SAR‬ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 2.0‬ﻭﺍﻁ‪/‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻏﺮﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﻏﺮﺍﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﺴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺤﺴﺒﺎ ﻷﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴّﺔ ﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ‬
‫ًّ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻄﺮﺃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌ ّﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴّﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ‪ SAR‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪www.lgmobile.com. lgmobile.‬‬
‫‪.com‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴّﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺍً‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻲ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻹﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫• ﻻ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﺭﻃﺒﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺤﻨﻪ ﺟﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺎً ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ )ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻨﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎً‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺛﺎﺙ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﻻ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺬﺍﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ؛ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﻲء‬
‫ﺣﺎﺩ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ّ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻛﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺬﺭ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺒﺐ ﻳﺪﻋﻮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ّ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﺫﻥ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﺒﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺾ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨّﻌﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺾ ﺑﺈﺑﻘﺎء ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 15‬ﺳﻢ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺾ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺾ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺾ ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒّﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﻟﻸﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﺎً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ّ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ‪ RF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻜﻴﺲ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺒﻄﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍء ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺗﻨﻘﻠﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻻ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺭﻛﺎً ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻠﺰﻣﺎً ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﻤﻌﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ّ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻤﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺄﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺫﻧﻚ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﻰ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺴﻪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗ ّﺘﺴﻢ ﺃﺟﻮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻔﺠﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻭﺗﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒّﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺴﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺨﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ‪ LG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ‪ LG‬ﻣﺼﻤّﻤﺔ ﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﺩﺍﺅﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻨﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬
‫• ﻻ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﻠّﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻃﺒﻘﺎً‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨّﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺨﻠّﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺄﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻓﺮﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪LG Electronics‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‪/‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻛﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻻﺝ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻏﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻏﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻓﻌﻪ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺄﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﺮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪USIM‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،USIM‬ﺍﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪USIM‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﻣﻌﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪.GU285‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ GU285‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺛﺎﺙ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ّ .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﺻﻼ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻬﻴﺄ ًﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﱟ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺄﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﻠﻄﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴّﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪0000‬‬
‫ﻛﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻚ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯﺍً ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻣﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﻄﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ >ﻓﺎﺭﻍ<‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫)ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ(‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻻ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫‪ GPRS‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫‪ 3G‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫‪ EDGE‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ّ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺸﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮّﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻗﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ WAP‬ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻹﻏﻼﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ +‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺩﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ‪.0‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺑﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳُﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺍً ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻓﺾ ﻟﺮﻓﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪ 1‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺗﻚ؛ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻃﻠﺒﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴّﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻭﻻ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ـ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺘﻬﻢ‬
‫ﺩﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻃﻠﺒﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻠﻤﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ـ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻃﻠﺒﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻠﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﺭﺳﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺳﺠﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﻠﺖ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ -‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻻ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻚ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ -‬ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻷﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺣﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN2‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤّﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪-‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ـ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ـ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻈﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ‪ -‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ‪ -‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺮ ّﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺮﺭ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ّ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ -‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤ ﱢﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ -‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ -‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﻗﻤﻚ ﻣﺤﺠﻮﺑﺎً‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺬﺍﺭ ‪ -‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗ ّﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﻓﺾ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪ -‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ‪ -‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ - DTMF‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ‪DTMF‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ -‬ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ‪BT‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮ ّﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪ -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻡ ﻻ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺮﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء…‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺭﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺃﺭﻗﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ USIM‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺍً ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺯﻣﻼﺋﻚ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺋﻠﺘﻚ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻣﻼء‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭ‪ VIP‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌ ّﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﺳﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ )ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.(SIM‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻨﻚ ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪USIM‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.USIM‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.USIM‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﺘﺄﻛﺪﺍً‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ GU285‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑـ ‪) SMS‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑـ‬
‫‪) MMS‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ SMS‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪.MMS‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪MMS‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴُﻔﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ SMS‬ﻭ‪MMS‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.SMS‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،T9‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪ Abc‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪.123‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ .GU285‬ﻓﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪ POP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪IMAP4‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺳﻬﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗُﻌﺘﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻝ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻝ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .T9‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻤًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻨﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻴﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ‪ -‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪ GU285‬ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺮﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺴﺮ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪ GU285‬ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪ -‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ‪ -‬ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻠﻤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ‪ -‬ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ ‪ -‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻔﻆ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺘﺒﺘﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ‪ -‬ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺗﻲ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻧﻘﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺗﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ‪ -‬ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺭﺩ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻔﻀﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﺩ‪ - :‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ‪ -‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ـ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ -‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ـ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪ -‬ﺃﻛﺘﺐ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻐﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺭﺳﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ -‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً‬
‫ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺷﺎﻫﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺷﺎﻫﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻧﺺ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫‪ّ GU285‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ـ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻛـ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﻛﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ SMS‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪ MMS‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻃﻮﻟﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫‪ّ GU285‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ -‬ﺣﻮّﻝ ﻧﺼﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،Fax‬ﺃﻭ ‪ X.400‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺠﻮﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ـ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ـ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎء ‪ -‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪.MMS‬‬
‫)ﻣﻘﻴﺪ ﻭﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻭﻣﺠﺎﻧﻲ(‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ‪ -‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌ ّﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )‪(MMS‬‬
‫ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‬‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻖ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺗﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﺍً‬‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎً ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺪﻯ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ‪ GU285‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ ‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺭ ّﺩﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﻼﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ـ ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻌﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺷ ّﻐﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ـ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺩﻓﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮّﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪ -‬ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺍﻗﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.38‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻸﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪/‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻟﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ‪ -‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ،3‬ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ .10‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ‪ّ .‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻊ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺟﺪﺍً‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻭﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺘﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ -‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪/‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ /‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺮﻯ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛـ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪29‬‬
‫ﻟـ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛـ ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ ﻛـ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻻﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ -‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺍً‪ ،‬ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺳﻴﺤﺘﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻮﻋﺐ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻤﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛـ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻛـ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰ ٍء‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪ -‬ﻣﻦ ‪ -2.0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ +2.0‬ﺑﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ‪ .0.5‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺷﺮ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﺘﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ“ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪ Rec‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ـ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮّ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛـ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 29‬ﻟـ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ -‬ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘ ّﻮ ّ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻛﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ -‬ﺑﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﻣﻀﻤّﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪ LG GU285‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻞ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪:Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ ،MP3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻧﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﻌﺖ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍً‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ـ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺳﻴﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻮﻟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻲ ‪ -‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻧﻮﻥ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ‪ :‬ﻛﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ ،(DRM‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺣﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء“ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻠﻘﺎﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫‪ MMS‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻚ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺤﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﺘﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ -‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻟﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻫﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ .‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ّ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ّ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﻀﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ : :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ـ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛـ ‪ -‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺮّﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ‪ -‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ -‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ -‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻳﻖ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ - Bluetooth‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ -‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﺤﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻹﺣﻀﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺣﺴﺐ ـ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪ -‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ -‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴّﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ‪ -‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺣﺴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ ّ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻛﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﻓﺴﺘُﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺳﻴﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﻣﺎ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻓﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺗﺎً ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛـ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣ ّ‬
‫ُﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ -‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛـ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ -‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.Bluetooth ،‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ -‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ‪ -‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ‪ -‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ ‪ -‬ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ‪-‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ‪،Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘُﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫‪ .MMS‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﺍً ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫‪.MMS‬‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ GU285‬ﻣﺤﻤًّﻼ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‬
‫ﺑﺄﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺗﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻭﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎً ﻟﻠﺤﺪﺙ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺪﺙ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍً ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻴﻨﺎً‬
‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ّ‬
‫ﻳﺮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻣﺮﺭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺮّﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺮﺭ ﻳﻮﻣﻴﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻋﻴﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺷﻬﺮﻳﺎً ﺃﻭ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎً‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺗﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺛﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻫﻮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ .Quick‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪،Quick‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎً ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒّﻪ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒّﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒّﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒّﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺛﻨﻴﻦ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺛﻨﻴﻦ‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻄﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﺎً‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺒّﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ )‪ ،+‬ﻭ–‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫*‪ ،‬ﻭ ÷(‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻳﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫=‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﻘﻴﺪﺍً‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪20‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﻓﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫”ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ“ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻭﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻳﺪﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺖ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺳﻬﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎً ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻪ ‪.URL‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺗﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ‪RSS‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ‪ RSS‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍً‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﺘﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﺘﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺑﺤﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺿﻮﻻﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺘﻚ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪.GU285‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.25‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺎﺿﻮﻻﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺘﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻋﺎﺿﻮﻻﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺎﺿﻮﻻﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪24‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ 12‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )‪YYYY.‬‬
‫‪MM.DD, DD.MM.YYYY,‬‬
‫‪) (MM.DD.YYYY‬ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‪.‬ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ‪.‬ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ‪.‬ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ‪.‬ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ّﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪.2‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ -‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪ GU285‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ )‪ 4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﻳﺤﻤﻲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ “ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ“‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ‬
‫”‪.“0000‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ـ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻃﻠﺒﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ‪ -‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ ،PIN‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫‪ ،PIN2‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ -‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ -‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ‪ -‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ ‪ -‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﺣﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 0%‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 20%‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 40%‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 60%‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 80%‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ،100%‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪ -‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻖ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ‪ GU285‬ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺳﺘﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺠﻮﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ‪.GU285‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺎﺑﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺗﻚ ﻫﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ - Bluetooth‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪GU285‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ .Bluetooth‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺮﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ - USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪ -‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻨﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ‪ -‬ﺗُﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻨﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺯﻣﺔ ‪ -‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‘ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ’‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ GPRS‬ﻟﺪﻯ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‘ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ’‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺸﺄ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ GPRS‬ﻟﻤ ّﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪ WAP‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ‪ -‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ[ ]ﻣﺮﺋﻲ[ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﺸﻒ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺤﺜﻬﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ .Bluetooth‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻛﺸﻒ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺤﺜﻬﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻨﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪﻫﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻲ ‪ -‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﺇﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻡ ﻻ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﺾ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ GU285‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ‬
‫ﺁﻣﻨﺎً ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ GU285‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺁﻣﻨﺎً ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ‬
‫‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺤﺐ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻟﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻴﺘﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ GU285‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺱ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻧﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺳﻴﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻮﻟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﺘُﺤﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻘﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺫ ﻻ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺳﻬﻼ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻘﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪،Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪:Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺳﻴﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ GU285‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻟﺘﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺮﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺭﺍﻗﺐ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺇﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ®‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ SIG, Inc.‬ﻭﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ‪ LG Electronics‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ”ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً“ ﻛﺎﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ”ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً“‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ -‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪-‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ -‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ‪.PC Suite‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪-‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻛﻤﻮﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ! ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻷ ﻣﻦ ّ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ!‬
‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﺇﺫ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳُﻄﺒّﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻗﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻓﻲ ّ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍً ﻟﻼﻧﻄﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻛﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ GU285‬ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﻱ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻣﺜﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ .USB‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻛـ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﻱ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪Macintosh‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺛﻨﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻳُﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﻭﺇﻓﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪64‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪PC-‬‬
‫‪Suite‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻃﻤﺌﻨﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ LG PC Suite‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪www.lgmobile.com‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺁﺳﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺩﺉ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻭﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ٍﺬ ﻣﺜﺒّﺖ ‪LG PC Suite.‬‬
‫‪ (Windows XP‬ﻭ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪ Media Player‬ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒّﺖ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻣﺜﺒّﺖ ‪.LG PC Suite‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫‪ LG PC Suite‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮﺍً ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎً ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪LG PC‬‬
‫‪ Suite‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‪ .‬ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ PC Suite‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪65‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ PC Suite‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪ LG‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﻔﻈﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،USIM‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ PC Suite‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ PC Suite‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ USIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪66‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﻔﻆ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ‪LG Mobile Phone‬‬
‫‪ Software‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪LGmobile.com: http://‬‬
‫‪www.lgmobile.com - select‬‬
‫‪country - Manual & software‬‬
‫‪banner‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺮﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺈﻟﺤﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ‪ّ ،‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻷﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ّ‬
‫ﻷﻥ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪67‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪﻙ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪.GU285‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪.GU285‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫‪68‬‬
‫‪ | LG GU285‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻷﺧﺮﻯ؛‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪GU285 :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪GSM850 / E-GSM900 / DCS1800 / PCS1900 / WCDMA :‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ‪ +55 :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ(‪ +45 ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺷﺤﻦ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ‪ -10 :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪69‬‬
Some of the contents in this
manual may differ from your phone
depending on the software of the
phone or your service provider.
GU285 User Guide
ENGLISH
Congratulations on your purchase
of the advanced and compact
GU285 phone by LG, designed to
operate with the latest digital mobile
communication technology.
Contents
GUIDELINES
Changing the call settings ..........25
Common settings ......................25
Guidelines for safe and efficient
use ................................................8 Contacts ......................................27
Searching for a contact ..............27
01 SET UP
Adding a new contact ................27
Getting to know your phone .........15
Adding a contact to a group .......27
Open view ...................................16
Adding a picture to a contact ......28
Installing the USIM and battery ....17
Copying your contacts to your
Memory card ...............................20
USIM / Handset .........................28
Installing a memory card ............20 Messaging ...................................29
Removing a memory card ..........20
Messaging ................................29
Formatting a memory card .........20
Sending a message ...................29
Entering text ..............................30
02 YOUR HOME SCREEN
Text input mode using the
Your Home screen........................21
keypad......................................30
The status bar ...........................21
Setting up your email .................30
Sending an email using your
03 THE BASICS
new account .............................30
Calls ............................................22
Message folders ........................31
Making a call.............................22
Managing your messages ..........31
Making a call from your
Using templates.........................32
contacts ....................................22
Changing your text message
Answering and rejecting a call ....22
settings .....................................33
Speed dialling............................22
Changing your multimedia
Viewing your call logs ................23
message settings ......................33
Using call divert .........................24
Changing your email settings .....34
Using call barring.......................24
Changing your other settings ......35
4
LG GU285 | User Guide
04 GET CREATIVE
My stuff .......................................44
Images......................................44
Camera........................................36
Pictures options menu ...............44
Taking a quick photo ..................36
Sending a photo ........................45
Before you take your photo.........36
Organising your images .............45
After you’ve taken your photo .....37
Deleting an image .....................45
Changing the image size ............38
Creating a slide show.................46
Viewing your saved photos .........38
Sounds .....................................46
Setting a photo as Wallpaper ........38
Using a sound ...........................46
Video camera...............................39
Videos ......................................46
Shooting a quick video ...............39
Watching a video .......................47
Before you take your video .........39
Using options while video is
After you’ve shot your video .......39
played.......................................47
Watching your saved videos .......40
Sending a video clip...................47
Music ..........................................41
Games / Applications .................48
Music store ...............................41
Others ......................................48
Transferring music onto your
Games & apps .............................49
phone .......................................41
Games & apps...........................49
Voice recorder .............................43
Playing a game..........................49
Using the Voice recorder ............43
Recording your voice memo .......43 05 GET ORGANISED
Sending a voice recording ..........43 Organiser.....................................50
Adding an event to your
calendar....................................50
Editing a calendar event .............50
Sharing a calendar event............51
5
Contents
Adding To-do list........................51 07 SETTINGS
Adding a memo .........................51 Settings .......................................56
Date finder ................................51
Changing your profiles ...............56
Tools ............................................52
Customising your profiles ...........56
Quick menu...............................52
Changing your date & time .........56
Setting your alarm .....................52
Changing the language ..............57
Using your calculator .................52
Changing your security settings ..57
Using the stopwatch ..................53
Changing your display settings ...57
Converting a unit .......................53
Resetting your phone .................58
Adding a city to your World
Viewing memory status ..............58
time ..........................................53 Connectivity ................................59
Changing your connectivity
06 BROWSER
settings .....................................59
Browser .......................................54
Changing your Bluetooth
Accessing the web.....................54
settings .....................................60
Adding and accessing your
Pairing with another Bluetooth
bookmarks ................................54
device .......................................60
RSS reader................................55
Using a Bluetooth headset ..........61
Saving a page ...........................55
Transferring a file to your phone .61
Accessing a saved page.............55
Sending and receiving your files
Viewing your browser history ......55
using Bluetooth .........................62
Changing the web browser
USB connection mode ................63
settings .....................................55
Always ask mode.......................63
6
LG GU285 | User Guide
Mass storage-Use your phone
as a mass storage device ...........63
PC suite-Synchronise your
phone with your PC....................64
Phone Software update ..............66
08 ACCESSORIES
Accessories .................................67
Technical data .............................68
General ....................................68
Ambient Temperatures ...............68
7
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
Please read these simple guidelines.
Not following these guidelines may
be dangerous or illegal.
Exposure to radio frequency
energy
THIS DEVICE MEETS
INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR
EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES
Your mobile device is a radio
transmitter and receiver. It is
designed and manufactured not to
exceed the limits for exposure to
radio frequency (RF) recommended
by international guidelines
(ICNIRP). These limits are part of
comprehensive guidelines and
establish permitted levels of RF
energy for the general population.
The guidelines were developed by
independent scientific organisations
through periodic and thorough
evaluation of scientific studies. The
guidelines include a substantial
safety margin designed to assure the
safety of all persons, regardless of
age and health.
8
LG GU285 | User Guide
The exposure standard for
mobile devices employs a unit of
measurement known as the Specific
Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR
limit stated in the international
guidelines is 2.0 W/kg*. Tests for
SAR are conducted using standard
operating positions with the device
transmitting at its highest certified
power level in all tested frequency
bands.
Although the SAR is determined at
the highest certified power level,
the actual SAR of the device while
operating can be well below the
maximum value. This is because
the device is designed to operate at
multiple power levels so as to use
only the power required to reach the
network. In general, the closer you
are to a base station, the lower the
power output of the device. Before
a phone model is available for sale
to the public, compliance with the
European R&TTE directive must be
shown. This directive includes as one
essential requirement the protection
of the health and the safety for the
user and any other person.
The highest SAR value for this device
when tested for use at the ear is 1.00
W/kg.
This device meets RF exposure
guidelines when used either in the
normal use position against the ear
or when positioned at least 1.5 cm
away from the body. When a carry
case, belt clip or holder is used for
body-worn operation, it should not
contain metal and should position
the product at least 1.5 cm away
from your body. In order to transmit
data files or messages, this device
requires a quality connection to the
network. In some cases, transmission
of data files or messages may be
delayed until such a connection is
available.
Ensure the above separation distance
instructions are followed until the
transmission is completed. The
highest SAR value for this device
when tested for use at the body is
1.08 W/kg.
* The SAR limit for mobile devices
used by the public is 2.0 watts/
kilogram (W/kg) averaged over ten
grams of body tissue. The guidelines
incorporate a substantial margin of
safety to give additional protection
for the public and to account for
any variations in measurements.
SAR values may vary depending on
national reporting requirements and
the network band.
For SAR information in other
regions please look under product
information at www. lgmobile.com.
9
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
Product care and
maintenance
WARNING
Only use batteries, chargers and
accessories approved for use
with this particular phone model.
The use of any other types
may invalidate any approval or
warranty applying to the phone,
and may be dangerous.
• Do not disassemble this unit. Take
it to a qualified service technician
when repair work is required.
• Keep away from electrical
• Do not handle the phone with wet
hands while it is being charged. It
may cause an electric shock and
can seriously damage your phone.
• Do not to charge a handset near
flammable material as the handset
can become hot and create a fire
hazard.
• Use a dry cloth to clean the
exterior of the unit (do not use
solvents such as benzene, thinner
or alcohol).
appliances such as TVs, radios,
and personal computers.
• Do not charge the phone when it
• The unit should be kept away from
• The phone should be charged in a
heat sources such as radiators or
cookers.
• Do not drop.
• Do not subject this unit to
mechanical vibration or shock.
• Switch off the phone in any area
where you are required by special
regulations. For example, do not
10
use your phone in hospitals as
it may affect sensitive medical
equipment.
LG GU285 | User Guide
is on soft furnishings.
well ventilated area.
• Do not subject this unit to
excessive smoke or dust.
• Do not keep the phone next to
credit cards or transport tickets; it
can affect the information on the
magnetic strips.
• Do not tap the screen with a sharp
object as it may damage the
phone.
• Do not expose the phone to liquid
or moisture.
• Use the accessories like
earphones cautiously. Do not
touch the antenna unnecessarily.
Efficient phone operation
Electronic and medical
devices
All mobile phones may get
interference, which could affect
performance.
• Do not use your mobile phone
near medical equipment without
requesting permission. Please
consult your doctor to determine
if operation of your phone may
interfere with the operation of your
medical device.
Pacemakers
Pacemaker manufacturers
recommend that a minimum
separation of 15cm be maintained
between a mobile phone and
a pacemaker to avoid potential
interference with the pacemaker. To
achieve this use the phone on the
opposite ear to your pacemaker and
do not carry it in a breast pocket.
Hospitals
Switch off your wireless device when
requested to do so in hospitals,
clinics or health care facilities. These
requests are designed to prevent
possible interference with sensitive
medical equipment.
• Some hearing aids might be
disturbed by mobile phones.
• Minor interference may affect TVs,
radios, PCs, etc.
11
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
Road safety
Check the laws and regulations on
the use of mobile phones in the area
when you drive.
• Do not use a hand-held phone
while driving.
• Give full attention to driving.
• Use a hands-free kit, if available.
• Pull off the road and park before
making or answering a call if
driving conditions so require.
• RF energy may affect some
electronic systems in your vehicle
such as car stereos and safety
equipment.
• When your vehicle is equipped
with an air bag, do not obstruct
with installed or portable wireless
equipment. It can cause the air
bag to fail or cause serious injury
due to improper performance.
12
LG GU285 | User Guide
• If you are listening to music whilst
out and about, please ensure that
the volume is at a reasonable
level so that you are aware of your
surroundings. This is particularly
imperative when near roads.
Avoid damage to your
hearing
Damage to your hearing can occur
if you are exposed to loud sound for
long periods of time. We therefore
recommend that you do not turn on
or off the handset close to your ear.
We also recommend that music and
call volumes are set to a reasonable
level.
Glass Parts
Some parts of your mobile device are
made of glass. This glass could break
if your mobile device is dropped on a
hard surface or receives a substantial
impact. If the glass breaks, do not
touch or attempt to remove. Stop
using your mobile device until the
glass is replaced by an authorized
service provider.
Blasting area
Children
Do not use the phone where blasting
is in progress. Observe restrictions,
and follow any regulations or rules.
Keep the phone in a safe place
out of the reach of small children.
It includes small parts which may
cause a choking hazard if detached.
Potentially explosive
atmospheres
• Do not use the phone at a
refueling point.
• Do not use near fuel or chemicals.
• Do not transport or store
flammable gas, liquid, or
explosives in the same
compartment of your vehicle
as your mobile phone and
accessories.
In aircraft
Wireless devices can cause
interference in aircraft.
• Turn your mobile phone off before
boarding any aircraft.
• Do not use it on the ground
without permission from the crew.
Emergency calls
Emergency calls may not be
available under all mobile networks.
Therefore, you should never depend
solely on the phone for emergency
calls. Check with your local service
provider.
Battery information and care
• You do not need to completely
discharge the battery before
recharging. Unlike other battery
systems, there is no memory
effect that could compromise the
battery’s performance.
• Use only LG batteries and
chargers. LG chargers are
designed to maximize the battery
life.
• Do not disassemble or short-
circuit the battery pack.
13
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
• Keep the metal contacts of the
battery pack clean.
• Replace the battery when it
no longer provides acceptable
performance. The battery pack
maybe recharged hundreds of
times until it needs replacing.
• Recharge the battery if it has
not been used for a long time to
maximize usability.
• Do not expose the battery charger
to direct sunlight or use it in high
humidity, such as in the bathroom.
• Do not leave the battery in hot or
cold places, this may deteriorate
the battery performance.
• There is risk of explosion if the
battery is replaced by an incorrect
type.
• Dispose of used batteries
according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. Please recycle when
possible. Do not dispose as
household waste.
14
LG GU285 | User Guide
• If you need to replace the battery,
take it to the nearest authorized
LG Electronics service point or
dealer for assistance.
• Always unplug the charger from
the wall socket after the phone is
fully charged to save unnecessary
power consumption of the charger.
• Actual battery life will depend on
network configuration, product
settings, usage patterns, battery
and environmental conditions.
Getting to know your phone
Main screen
OK key
Left softy key
Goes to My stuff
directly.
Multi-tasking key
Call key
Dials a phone number
and answers incoming
calls.
Programmable hot key
You can register the favourite
menu as a hot key.
Right soft key
Goes to Contacts directly/
go back to a previous
screen.
Clear Key
Deletes a character with
each press.
End/Power key
Ends or rejects a call. Turns
the phone on/off.
Returns to the Home screen
when you use the menu.
Navigation keys
• In menu: Navigates between menus.
15
Open view
Memory card slot
Charger, cable,
handsfree
connector
Battery cover
Camera lens
Battery
16
LG GU285 | User Guide
Installing the USIM and battery
1 Remove the battery cover
Press the battery cover release
latch. The battery cover should
slide and lift off easily.
2 Remove the battery
Lever the bottom edge of the
battery and remove it carefully
from the battery compartment.
WARNING: Do not remove the
battery when the phone is switched
on, as this may damage the phone.
3 Install the USIM card
Slide the USIM card into the USIM
card holder. Make sure that the
gold contact area on the card is
facing downwards. To remove
the USIM card, push it out of the
holder from the top.
WARNING: Do not insert the
USIM card when the slide is open,
as this may damage your phone and
USIM card.
17
Installing the USIM and battery
4 Install the battery
Insert the top of the battery first
into the top edge of the battery
compartment. Ensure the battery
contacts align with the terminals
on the phone. Press the bottom
of the battery down until it clips
into place.
18
LG GU285 | User Guide
5 Replace the battery cover
Insert the top of the battery cover
and push down and slide until it
clicks into place.
6 Charging your phone
Pull open the cover of the charger
socket on the side of your GU285.
Insert the charger and plug into
a mains electricity socket. Your
GU285 will need to be charged
until a message reading Fully
Charged appears on screen.
WARNING: Do not charge the
phone when it is on soft furnishings.
The phone should be charged in a
well ventilated area.
19
Memory card
Installing a memory card
You can expand the memory space
available on your phone using a
memory card.
NOTE: A memory card is an optional
accessory.
Open the memory card cover. Slide
the memory card into the slot until
it clicks into place. Make sure that
the gold contact area is facing
downwards.
Formatting a memory card
Your memory card may already be
formatted. If not you will need to do
so before you can begin using it.
1 From the Home screen press
and select Settings.
2 Choose Memory info and select
External memory.
3 Press Format and enter the
Removing a memory card
Open the cover and carefully remove
the memory card by gently pushing it
in to the phone and quickly releasing
it, as shown in the following diagram:
20
LG GU285 | User Guide
password, which is set to 0000
as default. Your card will be
formatted and ready to use.
WARNING: When you format
your memory card, all the content will
be wiped. If you do not want to lose
the data on your memory card, back
it up first.
Your Home screen
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons to
indicate things like signal strength,
new messages and battery life, as
well as telling you whether your
Bluetooth connection is active.
The table below explains the
meaning of icons you’re likely to see
in the status bar.
Icon
TIP! You can quickly access chosen
menus using your Favourites list. In
standby mode press the programmable
hot key. Select <Empty>, and then
Select to add a menu as a favourite.
Icon
Description
Description
Multitasking available
Network signal
strength (number of
bars will vary)
Memory card installed
No network signal
GPRS available
3G available
EDGE available
Flight mode is activated
Calls are diverted
Roaming service
WAP service is
connected
An alarm is set
Schedule
New message
New voice message
Normal profile in use
Silent profile in use
Outdoor profile in use
Headset profile in use
Remaining battery life
Battery empty
21
Calls
Making a call
1 Make sure your phone is on.
2 You can use the keypad after
opening the slide. To delete a digit
press
or the back arrow.
3 Press
to begin the call.
4 To end the call, press
or slide
the cover closed.
TIP! To enter + when making an
international call, press and hold 0.
Making a call from your
contacts
1 Select Contacts in the menu and
then Search.
2 Using the keypad, enter the first
letter of the contact you want to
call and scroll to the contact.
3 Press
to begin the call.
Answering and rejecting
a call
When your phone rings, press
Accept or press
to answer the
call.
While your phone is ringing you can
press Silent to mute the ringing. This
is useful if you have forgotten to
change your profile to Silent for a
meeting.
or select Reject in order
Press
to reject an incoming call.
Speed dialling
You can assign a speed dial number
to a contact you call frequently.
1 Press
to open the main
menu. Select Contacts, then
select Speed dials.
2 Your voicemail is preset to speed
dial 1 and you cannot change this.
Select any other number either
by using the navigation keys and
selecting Set or by pressing the
hard key number.
22
LG GU285 | User Guide
3 Your address book will open.
Select the contact you’d like to
assign to that number using the
navigation keys then select OK.
To call a speed dial number, press
and hold the assigned number until
the contact appears on screen. The
call will begin automatically and there
is no need to press
.
Viewing your call logs
Press
Call duration - View details of how
long you have spent on your calls;
Last, dialled,received and All.
Call costs - View the charges
applied to your last call or all calls.
This service is network dependent,
some operators are unable to
support this.
Data volume - View the amount of
all your received and sent data in
Kilo bytes.
and select Calls.
All calls - View a complete list of
all your dialled, received and missed
calls.
Missed calls - View a list of any
calls you have missed.
Dialled calls - View a list of all the
numbers you have called.
TIP! From any call log select Options
and then Delete to delete selected
items.
TIP! Use the navigation keys to
highlight any single call entry in order
to to view the date and time of the call.
To view the call duration select View.
Received calls - View a list of all
the numbers that have called you.
23
Calls
Using call divert
Using call barring
1 Press
1 Press
, select Settings.
2 Select Call- Call divert. Or you
can choose Deactivate all.
3 Choose whether to divert all calls,
when the line is busy, when there
is no answer, when you are out of
reach.
4 Choose Activate and input
number to be diverted.
5 Enter your divert number or select
Search to browse Contacts for
your divert number.
Note: Charges are incurred for
diverting calls. Please contact your
network provider for details.
TIP! To turn off all call diverts, choose
Deactivate all from the Call divert
menu.
24
LG GU285 | User Guide
, select Settings.
2 Select Call- Call barring.
3 Choose any or all of the five
options:
Outgoing calls
International calls
International calls except home
country
Incoming calls
Incoming calls when abroad
4 Select Activate and enter the call
barring password. Please check
with your network operator for this
service.
TIP! Select Fixed dial number from
the settings - call menu to turn
on and compile a list of numbers
which can be called from your phone.
You’ll need your PIN2 code from
your operator. When activated, only
numbers included in the fixed dial list
can be called from your phone.
Changing the call settings
Common settings
1 Press
Answer mode - Allows you to set
the answering method.You can
choose between Press send key,
Slide up and Press any key.
, select Settings- Call.
2 From here you can amend the
settings for:
Call divert - Choose whether to
divert your calls.
Call barring - Select which calls
you would like to be barred.
Call waiting - Be alerted when
you have a call waiting.
Fixed dial number - Choose a
list of numbers that can be called
from your phone.
Send my number
Set by network - Configures with
the default settings determined by
the service provider.
On - Your number will be sent
when making an outgoing call.
Off - Your number will be withheld
when making an outgoing call.
Excuse message - Save the
predefined notification message
before you reject a call.
Minute minder - Determines
whether to sound a tone every
1 minute when you are on the phone.
Common settings - Refer to
below contents in details.
Auto redial - Allows you to set
the auto redial function when a call
attempt has failed.
Send DTMF - DTMF allows you to
use numerical commands to navigate
menus within automated messages.
25
Calls
Save new number - Selecting this
option will save numbers that are not
already in your contacts upon ending
the call.
BT answer mode
Hands-free - You can answer a
call using a Bluetooth headset.
on the
Handset - Press
handset to answer a call when
using a Bluetooth headset.
Hang up mode - Set whether or not
a call is ended upon closing the slide.
Call reject - You can set whether to
reject incoming calls.
26
LG GU285 | User Guide
Contacts
Searching for a contact
1 Select Contacts from the main
menu, and choose
.
2 Using the keypad enter the first
letter of the name of the contact
you want to call.
3 To scroll through the contacts and
their different numbers use the
navigation keys.
Or to use a slightly quicker
method…
1 Enter the number you wish to
store and press Options.
2 Choose Save number, and
choose either New contact or
Update contact.
3 Enter the relevant information and
select Done.
Adding a new contact
Adding a contact to a group
1 Select Contacts and press left
You can save your contacts into
groups. This is useful for keeping
your work colleagues and family
separate, for example. There are a
number of groups including Family,
Friends, Colleagues, School and
VIP already set up on your phone.
soft key Options.
2 Select Create new contact.
3 Choose whether to store your new
contact on your Handset or USIM
card.
4 Enter the information you want
in the fields provided and select
Done.
1 Select Contacts and choose
Groups.
2 Scroll to the group you wish to
add a contact to and select View
then select.
27
Contacts
3 Your contacts list will open. Scroll
to any contacts you would like to
add to the group and press
,
then select Done.
TIP! You can assign a ringtone to a
group. Select the group you wish to
assign the ringtone to, select Options
and Edit Group - Group ringtone.
Note: You can only assign a contact
to a group or add a picture to a
contact that is saved in your phone
(not SIM) memory.
Adding a picture to a contact
You can change the appearance of
your contacts in your address book to
include a picture.
1 Select Contacts and choose
Create new contact.
2 Select square image to edit and
insert a picture.
3 Choose Change.
4 Choose No image, Go to
images, and Take a picture. If
you select Go to images, you can
choose an image that is saved in
your phone memory. If you select
Take a picture, your camera
viewfinder will open, so you can
take a picture of your contact.
Take the picture then press
Insert.
5 Select Done.
Copying your contacts to
your USIM / Handset
You can also choose to copy your
contacts from your USIM to your
handset or from your handset to
your USIM.
1 Select Contacts, choose options
- Storage location.
2 Select the menu Copy to USIM
/ Handset or Move to USIM /
Handset.
3 Select Done if you are sure.
28
LG GU285 | User Guide
Messaging
Messaging
Your GU285 includes functions
related to SMS (Short Message
Service), MMS (Multimedia Message
Service) and email, as well as the
network’s service messages. To use
and select
these functions press
Messaging.
Sending a message
1 Create a new message press
, select Messaging and choose
Create new message.
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS.
3 A new message editor will open.
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image, Video, Sound,
Symbols, Template, Emoticon,
Name & Number, New slide,
Subject or More.
6 Choose a contact from the list
of contacts or enter the phone
number from More.
7 Select Send.
WARNING: If an Image,
Sound, Video, New slide or
Subject is added to the message
editor, it will be automatically
converted to MMS mode and you will
be charged accordingly.
Message editor combines SMS
and MMS in one intuitive mode
that is easy to switch between.
The default setting of the message
editor is SMS mode.
4 Enter your message using the
keypad. See Entering text on the
right for more information on how
to enter text.
29
Messaging
Entering text
Setting up your email
You can enter alphanumeric
characters using the phone’s keypad.
For example, storing names in
Contacts, writing a message and
creating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering text.
The following text input methods are
available in the phone: T9 mode, Abc
mode, and 123 mode.
You can stay in touch on the move
using email on your GU285. It’s
quick and simple to set up a POP3 or
IMAP4 email account.
Note: Some fields may allow only
one text input mode (e.g. telephone
number in address book fields).
1 Press
, select Messaging
and choose Settings.
2 Select E-mail and then choose
E-mail accounts.
3 Select Add and follow the pop
up instruction and enter the
information required.
Text input mode using the
keypad
Sending an email using your
new account
When you want to enter text, for
example when writing a message,
the keypad will default to T9 mode.
If you are entering a number, for
example when making a call, the
keypad number keys will default to
numbers.
To send/receive an email, you should
set up an email account (see above).
1 Press
, select Messaging and
choose Create new message.
2 Choose E-mail and a new email
window will open.
3 Write a subject line then press OK.
4 Enter your message using the
keypad.
30
LG GU285 | User Guide
MailBox - This contains all your
email messages. Select the account
you want to use then select
Retrieve. Your GU285 will connect
to your email account and retrieve
your new messages.
Message folders
Press
, then select Messaging.
The folder structure used on your
GU285 should be self-explanatory.
Create new message - Create your
new message.
Sent items - Copies of all the
messages you send are kept into
your Sent folder.
My folders - You can move
messages of Inbox or Sent messages
into My folders. Also you can move
those messages of My folders into
the original message box.
Templates - A list of pre written
useful messages which you can edit,
useful for a quick reply.
Emoticons - You can add, edit and
delete emoticons. You can insert the
emoticon which you preferred on
writing a message.
Inbox - All the messages you receive
are placed into your Inbox. From here
you can reply, forward and more. See
Managing your messages.
Managing your messages
Mailbox - All the mails you receive
are placed into your Mailbox.
You can use your Inbox to manage
your messages.
Drafts - If you don’t have time to
finish writing a message, you can
save what you have written so far
in here.
1 Press
Outbox - This is a temporary storage
folder used while messages are
being sent and the messages which
are failed to send.
, select Messaging
and choose Inbox.
2 Select Options and then choose
to:
Reply - Send a reply to the
selected message.
31
Messaging
Forward - Send the selected
message on to another person.
Call - Call the person who sent
you the message.
Save number - Save the number
of the message.
Delete - Delete the selected
message.
Create new message - Write a
new Message, Email. regardless
who sent you message.
Using templates
You can create templates for the
Text and Multimedia messages
you send most frequently. There
are some templates already on
your phone, which can be edited if
you wish.
Multi selection - Mark a
message or all.
1 Press
Copy & Move - Choose to copy
or move the selected message to
the SIM card or Handset.
2 Choose Text templates or
Filter - Displays messages by
desired message types.
Message info - You can check
the of its type, subject, where it is
from, and its date.
If you see the message No space
for SIM message, you should
delete some messages from your
inbox to create space.
32
If you see the message No space
for messages, you can delete either
messages or saved files to create
more space.
LG GU285 | User Guide
, select Messaging
and choose Templates.
Multimedia templates. In text
template menu, you can then
select Options and choose Edit
to change existing templates, or
Add new to create new template.
3 To send a template, select
Messaging and choose
Create new message. Choose
Message
4 Choose Options and select
Insert, choose Template.
5 Choose template you want to send
and select Send.
Changing your text message
settings
Character encoding - Choose how
your characters are encoded. This
affects the size of your message and
therefore data costs.
Your GU285 message settings are
pre-defined so that you can send
messages immediately.
Send long text as - Choose whether
to send your message as Multiple SMS
or MMS when you enter a text longer
than 2 pages in the message field.
If you would like to change the
settings, you can do this using the
Settings options.
Changing your multimedia
message settings
Press
, select Messaging, then
choose Settings and Text message.
You can make changes to:
Your GU285 message settings are
pre-defined so that you can send
messages immediately.
Text Message centre - Enter the
details for your message centre.
If you would like to change the
settings, you can do so using the
Settings options.
Delivery report - Choose to receive
confirmation that your message was
delivered.
Validity period - Choose how
long your message is stored at the
message centre.
Message types - Convert your text
into Voice, Fax, X.400 or Email.
Press
, select Messaging, then
choose Settings and Multimedia
message.
You can make changes to:
Retrieval mode - Choose to
automatically or manually download
multimedia messages depending on
whether you are at home or roaming.
33
Messaging
Delivery report - Choose to request
or allow a delivery report.
Read reply - Choose to request or
allow a read reply.
Priority - Choose the priority level of
your multimedia message.
Validity period - Choose how
long your message is stored at the
message centre.
Slide duration - Choose how long
your slides appear on screen.
Creation mode - Allows you to
select the contents type supported
by MMS. (Restricted, Warning
and Free)
Delivery time - Configures the
delivery time of message to the
recipient. The Multimedia message
centre will deliver the message after
the delivery time
MMS centre - Allows you to
configure network information such
as the MMSC and the Internet profile,
to send a multimedia message.
34
LG GU285 | User Guide
Changing your email settings
You can adapt your email settings to
your own preferences.
1 Press
, select Messaging
and choose Settings.
2 Select E-mail then you can adapt
the following settings:
E-mail accounts - You can set
up an email account.
Allow reply e-mail - Determines
whether to allow sending a read
confirmation mail for a read
confirmation mail request.
Request reply e-mail Determines whether to request a
read confirmation mail.
Retrieve interval - Choose how
often your GU285 checks for new
email messages.
Retrieve amount - Choose how
many e-mails are retrieved in
selected time.
Include message in fwd &
reply - Choose whether or not to
include the original message.
Include attachment - Choose
whether or not to include the
original attachment.
Auto retrieval in roaming Choose whether or not to
automatically retrieve your
messages when abroad.
New e-mail notification Choose whether or not to be
alerted to new emails.
Signature - Create an email
signature and switch this feature
on.
Priority - Choose the priority level
of your email messages.
Changing your other settings
Voicemail - You can edit the
Voicemail.
Service message - Here you can
switch off Service message, which
means your messages will no longer
be pushed directly to your device
as they are received, only when you
check for new messages. You can
also change your service message
security.
Info. service - Choose the Cell
broadcast, channels and language of
your info messages.
35
Camera
Taking a quick photo
1 Press
and Select Camera to
open the viewfinder.
2 Holding the phone and, point the
lens towards the subject of the
photo.
3 Position the phone so you can see
the subject of your photo.
4 Press
to take a photo.
Before you take your photo
Press Preview in Settings for the
following options: Some of those
settings will be shown at Video
Camera Settings, too.
Image size- See Changing the
image size on page 38.
Preview size - Select the preview
image: Full image or Full screen.
Effect - Choose from four colour
tone options: None (normal colour),
Sepia, Black & White or Negative.
36
LG GU285 | User Guide
White balance - The white balance
ensures that any white in your photo
is realistic. In order for your camera
to correctly adjust the white balance
you may need to determine the
light conditions. Choose from Auto,
Incandescent, Sunny, Indoors
or Cloudy.
Night mode - You can take better
pictures at night by selecting On.
Timer - The timer allows you to set
a delay after the capture button is
pressed before the camera fires.
Choose from None, 3 Sec, 5 Sec or
10 Sec. Great for when you want to
include yourself in the photo.
Shot Mode - Choose from Normal,
Burst shot and Frame shot. Burst
shot lets you to take up to Three,
Six, Nine shots automatically in very
quick succession, great for taking
photos of moving objects or at
sporting events.
Quality - Choose between Super
fine, Fine and Normal. The finer the
quality, the sharper a photo will be.
The file size will increase as a result,
which means you will be able to store
fewer photos in your memory.
Press Others in Settings for the
following options:
Memory - Check the current status:
Handset/ External.
Hide icons - Select the display of
icon: Auto/ Manual.
Sound - Select shutter sound when
taking a picture.
Swap Cam - select internal /
External.
After you’ve taken your
photo
Your captured photo will appear on
the screen. The name of the image
is shown at the top of the screen and
you will see five options displayed on
the left side of the screen.
Images - Choose this to look
at the other photos in your album.
Your current photo will be saved.
Send - Select this send
the photo as a Message, Email
and Bluetooth. See page 29 for
Sending a message.
New - Use this to take another
photo straightaway. Your current
photo will be saved.
Use as - Select to open a
sub menu to use your image as
Wallpaper, Picture ID, Start up or
Shut down.
Delete - Deletes the photo
you have just taken. Confirm this by
selecting Yes. The viewfinder will
reappear.
37
Camera
Changing the image size
You can change the size of the photo
to save memory space. The more
pixels means the larger the file size,
this in turn means they take up more
of your memory. If you want to fit
more pictures on your phone you can
alter the pixel number to make the
file size smaller.
1 Press Settings and select Image
size from the toolbar.
2 Select a pixel value from the six
numerical options.
3 Press OK to save your changes.
Viewing your saved photos
1 You can access your saved photos
from within the camera mode
and also from the Home screen.
From the viewfinder, simply press
Album. From the Home screen
press
, then select My stuff
and Images.
2 Your gallery , Download image and
Default images folder will appear
on screen.
38
LG GU285 | User Guide
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view and
select View to open it.
Setting a photo as Wallpaper
From your image gallery, use the
navigation keys to select an image
and choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image as
Wallpaper, Picture ID Start-up
or Shut down, Incoming call or
Outgoing call. When you set the
photo as Picture ID you can choose
which part of the photo to use.
Note: Picture ID can only be added
to contacts saved to your phone, not
your SIM.
Video camera
Shooting a quick video
1 Press
and select Camera.
2 Choose Video camera.
3 Point the camera lens towards the
subject of the video.
4 Press OK to start recording.
5 Rec will appear in the bottom
right corner of the viewfinder and
a timer will show the length of
your video.
6 To pause the video select Pause
and resume by selecting Resume.
7 Select Stop to stop recording.
Before you take your video
Videos - Select to look at the other
video clips in your album
Camera - Convert from video
camera mode to still camera mode.
Rec. - Start video recording
Zoom - Adjust the zoom using
or
.
Brightness - The higher the level,
the brighter the screen.
After you’ve shot your video
The name of the video is shown
along the bottom of the screen and
five options will be displayed at the
bottom of the screen.
Videos - Select to look at the other
video clips in your album. Your
current video clip will be saved.
Play - Select to play the video you
have just recorded.
New - Select to shoot another video
straight away. Your current video will
be saved.
Send - Select to send the video as
a Message, E-mail or Bluetooth.
See page 29 for Sending a
message.
Delete - Delete the video you
have just recorded and confirm by
selecting Yes. The viewfinder will
reappear.
39
Video camera
Watching your saved videos
1 You can access your saved videos
either from within video camera
mode or from the Home screen.
Simply select Album. From the
Home screen you should press
, then select My stuff and
Videos.
2 Your gallery will appear on screen.
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the video you want to view and
press
key to watch it.
40
LG GU285 | User Guide
Music
Music store
Your LG GU285 has a built-in MP3
player so you can play all your
favourite music.
To access the MP3 player, press
and select Music. From here you
have access to:
Last played song - You can replay
the music which you recently
listened.
Transferring music onto your
phone
The easiest way to transfer music
onto your phone is via Bluetooth or
your sync cable. To transfer music
using Bluetooth:
1 Make sure both devices have
Bluetooth switched on and are
visible to one another.
2 Select the music file on the other
All songs - Contains all of the songs
you have on your phone.
device and choose to send it via
Bluetooth.
My playlists - Contains any playlists
you have created.
3 When the file is sent you should
Artists - Browse through your music
collection by artist.
Albums - Browse through your
music collection by album.
Genres - Browse through your music
collection by genre.
Shuffle tracks - Plays tracks in
random order
to accept it on your phone by
selecting Yes.
4 The file should appear in All
songs.
Note : As a result of the Digital
Rights Management (DRM) system,
some of the media items you
download from the Internet or receive
by MMS may have a “Purchase
right” menu to access them. You can
acquire the key to purchase the right
from the website which owns the
rights to the contents.
41
Music
Music is copyright protected in
international treaties and national
copyright laws. It may be necessary
to obtain permission or a licence to
reproduce or copy music. In some
countries national law prohibits
private copying of copyrighted
material. Please check the national
legislation of the applicable country
concerning the use of such material.
42
LG GU285 | User Guide
Voice recorder
Using the Voice recorder
Sending a voice recording
Use your Voice recorder to record
voice memos or other sounds.
1 Once you have finished recording,
Recording your voice memo
2 Select Send via and choose from
1 Press
and select Tools, then
choose Voice recorder.
2 Press
key to begin recording.
3 Choose Stop to end the recording.
4 Press Options and select Play to
listen to the recording.
select Options.
Message, Email, and Bluetooth.
If you choose Message or Email,
the recording will be added to the
message and you can write and
send it as normal. If you choose
Bluetooth, you will be prompted
to turn Bluetooth on.
Note: You can listen to all of the
voice recordings you have saved by
selecting Go to sounds.
43
My stuff
You can store any multimedia files in
your phone memory so that you have
easy access to all of your pictures,
sounds, videos and games. You can
also save your files to a memory
card. The advantage of using a
memory card is that you can free up
space on your phone memory.
Delete - Delete the selected image.
All your multimedia files are saved in
My stuff. Press
then select My
stuff to open a list of folders.
Move - To move image to a different
folder.
Images
Images contains a folder of default
images and default flash files
pre-loaded onto your phone, images
downloaded by you and images
taken on your phone camera.
Pictures options menu
The options which are available to
you in Images depend on what type
of image you have selected.
In the Images folder, select Options
to bring up the following options.
44
LG GU285 | User Guide
Set as - Set the selected image as
your Wallpaper, Picture ID, Startup, Shut down, Incoming call and
Outgoing call.
Rename - Change the file name of
selected image.
Copy - To copy image to a different
folder.
Send via - Send the selected image
to a friend via Message. Email,
Bluetooth.
Print via Bluetooth - Print an
image file via Bluetooth.
File info. - (Name, Size, Date,Time,
Resolution, Type and Protect) of the
selected image.
Multi- selection - Select one or
more image(s) to delete.
Search - Search the image with
file name.
Sort by - Arrange your images by
Date, Type or Name.
Slide show - Watch a slide show of
your images.
Grid view/List view - Change the
way you view your photos.
Memory info - You can view the
memory status (Handset memory or
External memory).
Organising your images
1 Press
then select My stuff.
2 Select Images.
3 Choose Options then select Sort
by.
4 Choose from Date, Type or
Name.
Deleting an image
Delete all - Delete all images.
1 Press
Sending a photo
2 Select Images.
1 Press
3 Select an image and press
then select My stuff.
2 Select Images.
3 Select a photo and choose
Options.
then select My stuff.
Options.
4 Select Delete and confirm by
pressing Yes.
4 Select Send via and choose from
Message, E-mail, Bluetooth.
5 If you choose Message or Email,
your photo will be attached to the
message and you can write and
send your message as normal. If
you choose Bluetooth, you will
be prompted to turn Bluetooth on
and your phone will search for a
device to send the picture to.
45
My stuff
Creating a slide show
Sounds
If you want to look at all of the
images on your phone, or scan
through what you’ve got, you can
create a slide show to save having
to open and close each individual
image.
The Sounds folder contains the
Default sounds, your Download
ringtones and sound files
downloaded by you. From here you
can manage, send or set sounds as
ringtones.
1 Press
Using a sound
then select My stuff.
2 Select Images.
3 Choose the photo you would like
to begin the slide show and select
Options.
4 Choose Slide show and it will
begin.
5 Press Stop to stop the slide show
and Back to end the slide show
and return to the Images folder.
During the slide show, press Options
to choose Full screen view and
Landscape viewand settings. Select
full screen view to view in fullscreen
mode, Landscape view to change
the orientation of the Pictures and
settings to set the repeat type,
Duration.
46
LG GU285 | User Guide
1 Press
then select My stuff.
2 Scroll to and select Sounds.
3 Select a sound and press Play to
listen to it.
4 Select Options, select Set as
and choose from Voice/Video
Ringtone, Message tone, Startup and Power off Sound.
Videos
The Videos folder shows the list of
downloaded videos and videos you
have recorded on your phone.
Watching a video
Sending a video clip
1 Press
1 Press
then select My stuff.
then select My stuff.
2 Scroll to and select Videos.
2 Scroll to and select Videos.
3 Select a video and press Play.
3 Select the video clip you want and
Using options while video is
played
4 Press Send via and choose from
By selecting Options, the video you
are playing and you can choose from:
Delete - Delete the video.
Set as - You can use a video clip as
ringtone.
Send via - Send via Message,
Email, Bluetooth.
File info - View details of the video.
Landscape view - Reorientate
the video.
Repeat - Repeat the video.
press Options.
Send via - Send via Message,
E-mail, Bluetooth.
5 If you choose Message or
E-mail, your video clip will be
attached to the message and
you can write and send the
message as normal. If you choose
Bluetooth, you will be prompted
to turn Bluetooth on and your
phone will search for a device to
send the video to.
Note: The video may need to be
resized before it can be sent by
MMS. Some videos may be too large
to send by MMS at all.
47
My stuff
Games / Applications
You can keep downloaded games
and applications into this folder.
Others
From the Others menu, you can view
the files which are not saved in the
Pictures, Sounds, or Videos.
48
LG GU285 | User Guide
Games & apps
Games & apps
Your GU285 comes with preloaded
games to keep you amused when
you have time to spare. If you choose
to download any additional games or
applications they will be saved into
this folder.
Playing a game
1 Press
and select Games &
apps and then Games.
2 You can use this menu to
download new games and play
the demo games already on your
phone.
Note: An additional cost is incurred
when connecting to the game
download service. Check your data
charges with your network provider.
49
Organiser
Adding an event to your
calendar
1 Press
, and select Organiser,
then Calendar.
2 Select the date you would like to
add an event to. You can choose a
date either by scrolling to it using
the navigation keys or by selecting
Options and Go to date in order
to enter a date.
3 Select New schedule and scroll
down to enter the time you would
like your event to begin. Scroll
down and enter the end time of
your event.
4 Enter a Subject for the event.
Use the keypad to type letters and
numbers.
5 Scroll down again and choose
whether you would like to set an
Alarm for the event. Scroll left or
right to see the available options.
You can set the alarm to go off
at the starting time of the event
or at a set period of time before
the event starts to remind you the
event is coming up.
50
LG GU285 | User Guide
6 Scroll down once more to select
whether the event is occurring
Once or repeated at Daily,
Weekly, Monthly or Annually
intervals. Also you can choose
User setting. If the event is
repeated, you can also scroll
down to enter an Expiration
date for when the events will stop
completely.
7 Select Done and your event will
be saved in the calendar. A square
cursor will mark the days of any
saved events.
Editing a calendar event
1 From the Home screen press
, and select Organiser, then
Calendar.
2 You can see a list of all your
events. Scroll to the event you
would like to edit and select View.
3 Press Options and Select Edit
and scroll to the event detail
you want to change. Make your
modifications and select Done to
store the edited event.
Note: You can delete an event from
your calendar by viewing the event
and then pressing Options and
Delete.
Adding a memo
Sharing a calendar event
2 Select New memo and type your
1 From the Home screen press
, and select Organiser, then
Calendar.
2 Choose the event you would like
to share and select Options.
3 Choose Send via and select from
Text message, MMS, E-mail or
Bluetooth.
1 From the Home screen press
, and select Organiser, then
Memo.
memo.
3 Select Save.
4 Your memo will appear on screen
the next time you open the memo
application.
TIP! You can edit an existing memo.
Select the one you want to edit, press
Options and select Edit.
4 Press Send and search a contact,
press Send
Adding To-do list
You can view, edit and add tasks to
do. Tasks are displayed in time order.
Date finder
Date finder is a handy tool to help
you calculate what the date will be
after a certain amount of days has
passed.
51
Tools
Quick menu
You can specify functions to save
in the Quick menu. If you save
frequently used functions in the
Quick menu, you can quickly use
them by pressing the corresponding
key.
Setting your alarm
1 Press
, and select Alarm
clock.
2 Press New alarm.
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to sound
at.
4 Choose the repeat type to indicate
whether you would like your alarm
to sound Once, Daily, Mon - Fri,
Mon - Sat, Except holiday, or
Choose weekday.
5 Scroll down and choose whether
you would like the alarm type.
6 Scroll down to choose the interval
of alarm snooze.
52
LG GU285 | User Guide
7 Scroll down and enter a name for
the alarm or keep the suggested
name.
8 Select Done.
Using your calculator
1 Press
, and select Tools, then
Calculator.
2 Press the numeric keys to input
numbers.
3 For simple calculations, select the
function you require (+, –, ×, ÷)
using the navigation keys followed
by =.
4 For more complex calculations,
select Options to choose a
command.
5 Select Clear key to clear
the screen and start a new
calculation.
Using the stopwatch
1 Press
, and select Tools, then
Stopwatch.
2 Select Start to begin the timer.
4 Scroll down to the unit conversion
box and choose the unit
measurement you want to convert
into. The conversion will show
automatically in the line below.
3 Choose Lap if want to record a
lap time. Up to 99 lap times can
be saved
Note: For Currency convert, you need
to set ‘Rate’ according to current
Exchange rate first.
4 Select Stop to end the timer.
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time you stopped
it at or select Reset to return to
zero.
Converting a unit
1 Press
, and select Tools, then
Unit Converter.
2 Choose whether you would like to
convert Currency, Area, Length,
Weight, Temperature, Volume
or Velocity.
3 Scroll left and right to select a
unit, then scroll down and enter
the unit quantity.
Adding a city to your World
time
1 From the Home screen press
, and select Tools, then World
clock.
2 To find out the time of specific city,
press Options and select New
city.
3 Scroll down the list or enter the
first letter of the city. Also you can
select Map and choose a city.
4 Press Select.
TIP! You can select the first letter of
the city required from the keypad to
speed up the process
53
Browser
With a browser at the tip of your
fingers, you can get up to date news
and weather forecasts, as well as
information on sports or traffic,
whenever you need it. In addition, the
browser allows you to download the
latest music, ringtones, wallpapers
and games.
Accessing the web
1 Press
and select Browser.
2 To access the browser homepage
directly, select Browser.
Note: An additional cost is incurred
when connecting to this service and
downloading content. Check your
data charges with your network
provider.
Adding and accessing your
bookmarks
For easy and fast access to your
favourite websites, you can add
bookmarks and save web pages.
1 Press
and select Browser.
2 Select Bookmarks. A list of your
bookmarks will appear on the
screen.
3 To add a new bookmark, select
Options and choose New
bookmark. Enter a name for your
bookmark followed by the URL.
4 Press Done. Your bookmark
will now appear in the list of
bookmarks.
5 To access the bookmark simply
scroll to the required bookmark
and select Connect. You will be
connected to your bookmarked
page.
54
LG GU285 | User Guide
RSS reader
Viewing your browser history
RSS reader provides news updates
for the websites registered on your
phone.
1 Press
Saving a page
1 Access your required web page
2 Choose Options and scroll to
Save, select This page.
3 A list of web page titles you
have accessed recently will be
displayed. To access one of these
pages, scroll to the required page
and select Open.
Changing the web browser
settings
3 Select OK.
Accessing a saved page
1 Press
and select Browser.
2 Select History and select OK.
and select Browser.
2 Select Saved pages.
3 Select the required page and
press Open.
TIP! This menu will also allow you to
delete saved pages.
1 Press
and select Browser.
2 Select Settings.
3 You can choose the way your
mobile handles, displays and uses
information when browsing the
internet. You can amend settings
within Profiles, Character
encoding, Scrolling control,
Show image, Java script
Cache, Cookies, Security, and
Reset settings.
4 Once you have changed your
settings, press Select.
55
Settings
Within this folder you can adapt
your settings to make your GU285
personal to you.
3 You can change all of the tones,
Note: For information on call settings
see page 25.
Changing your date & time
Changing your profiles
You can set functions relating to the
date and time.
1 Choose Settings and choose
1 Press
Profiles.
2 Choose from Normal, Silent,
Outdoor and Flight mode.
Tip! Use this function to switch the
flight mode On or Off. You will not
be able to make calls, connect to
the internet or send messages when
Flight mode is switched On.
Customising your profiles
You can customise each profile
setting.
1 Press Settings and select
Profiles.
2 Choose the profile you want,
select Options and choose
Personalise.
56
its volumes and alert options from
here.
LG GU285 | User Guide
and open Settings.
2 Select Date & Time and choose
from the list below:
Date & time setting - You can set
the date and time like auto update
setting or daylight saving.
Time format - You can set the
time format to either 24 hours or
12 hours. You can select a city as
time zone.
Date seperator - You can set the
date format (YYYY.MM.DD, DD.MM.
YYYY, MM.DD.YYYY).
Date separator - You can enter
the current time/current date set
the date and time like auto update
setting or daylight saving
Note Select On, and the phone
will automatically update the date
and time.
Note Select whether to activate the
daylight saving function or not. You
can set the Summer time difference
of selected home city for 1 hour or
2 hours.
Changing the language
Go to Settings, select Phone
and choose Language to change
the language for any text in your
phone. Any change will also alter the
language input mode.
Changing your security
settings
Change your security settings to
keep your GU285 and the important
information it holds protected.
1 Press
and open Settings.
2 Select Security and choose from
the list below:
Handset lock - Choose a security
code to lock your phone When
switch on, When SIM changed,
Immediately, None.
Lock application - Choose the
menu to lock when you use the
function.
PIN code request - Choose a PIN
code to be requested when you turn
your phone on.
Change codes - Change your PIN
code, PIN2 code or Lock code.
Note: Lock code (4 to 8 digits) The
Lock code protects the unauthorized
use of your phone. It is usually
supplied with the phone. This code is
required to delete all phone entries
and to activate “Reset settings”
menu. The default number is “0000”.
Changing your display
settings
1 Press
and select Settings.
2 Select Screen and choose from:
Homescreen - Select Home
screen and choose a wallpaper to
appear on your screen, Also you can
set display item.
57
Settings
Handset theme - Quickly change
the whole look of your screen.
Menu style - Change the menu view
from List style to Grid style.
Font - Change the font size from
Small, Medium,Large and Very large.
Greeting Message - After selecting
On, you can write a welcome
message. The message will appear
on screen whenever you start-up
the phone
Backlight - Choose how long the
backlight remains on. Also, Use the
navigation keys to adjust the Main
screen brightness. Choose from 0%,
20%, 40%, 60%, 80% or 100%.
TIP! The longer the backlight is on for,
the more battery power is used and
you may need to charge your phone
more often.
Other screens - Set the screen
when making or receiving a call or
switching on/ off the phone.
58
LG GU285 | User Guide
Resetting your phone
Use Reset settings in Settings to
reset all the settings to the factory
definitions. You need the security
code to activate this function.
Viewing memory status
Your GU285 has three memories
available: the phone, the USIM card
and an external memory card (you
may need to purchase the memory
card separately).
You can use the memory manager
to determine how each memory is
used and see how much space is
available.
Press Settings and choose Memory
info and you will then see the
current status of the memories
(Handset common memory, Handset
reserved memory, USIM memory and
External memory) in your GU285.
Connectivity
Changing your connectivity
settings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by your network
operator, so you can enjoy your new
phone straightaway. If you want to
change any settings, use this menu.
Select Connectivity. Your options
are:
Bluetooth - Set up your GU285 for
Bluetooth use. You can adapt your
visibility to other devices or search
through devices your phone is paired
with.
USB connection - You can select
the USB connection mode on your
phone for several uses.
Network - You can set Select
network and Network mode
settings using this menu. Also you
can add a preferable network to be
connected to Preferred lists.
Internet profiles - This menu
shows the Internet profiles. You
can create new profiles, delete or
edit them using the Options menu.
However, you cannot delete or edit
default configurations.
Access points - This menu shows
the access points list. You can create
new profiles, delete or edit them by
using the Options menu. However,
you cannot delete or edit default
configurations.
Packet Data Conn. - If you select
the ‘When available’ option, your
phone is automatically registered to
a GPRS network when you switch
the phone on. If you select “When
needed”, the GPRS connection is
established for the duration of a WAP
or application connection.
Streaming settings - Your network
operator has already saved this
information. You can edit it if you
want to make changes.
59
Connectivity
Changing your Bluetooth
settings
My address - Check your Bluetooth
address here.
1 Select Connectivity, then choose
Note : To improve security, we
recommend that once you have
configured or paired with a device,
Visibility be set to Hidden. For
incoming connections, regardless of
whether or not the other device has
been paired with your phone, you
can choose to accept or reject the
connection
Bluetooth.
2 Choose Settings. Make your
changes to:
My device visibility - Set [My
device visibility] [Visible] so that other
devices can detect your phone when
they are searching for a Bluetooth
device. If you select Hidden, other
devices will not be able to detect
your phone when they are searching
for a Bluetooth device. If you select
Visible for 1 min other devices will
not be able to detect your phone
within 1 min.
My device name - You can name or
rename your phone as it will appear
on other devices. Your phone’s name
will be shown on other devices only
when My device visibility is set to
Visible.
Supported services - You can view
the list of devices such as headsets
and handsfree supported by this
Bluetooth enabled phone.
60
LG GU285 | User Guide
Pairing with another
Bluetooth device
By pairing your GU285 and another
device, you can set up a passcode
protected connection. This means
your pairing is more secure.
1 Check your Bluetooth is Turn on
and Visible. You can change your
visibility in the Settings menu, by
selecting My device visibility,
then Visible.
2 From Bluetooth, choose Turn on
and Select Search new device
3 Your GU285 will search for
devices. When the search is
completed Add and Retry will
appear on screen.
4 Choose the device you want to
pair with, select Add and enter a
passcode then choose OK.
5 Your phone will then connect to
the other device, on which you
should enter the same passcode.
6 Your passcode protected Bluetooth
connection is now ready.
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and
Visible.
Transferring a file to your
phone
You can also transfer files from
your computer to your phone using
Bluetooth.
1 Make sure your phone and
computer have Bluetooth switched
on and are visible to one another.
2 Use your computer to send the file
via Bluetooth.
3 When the file is sent you will have
to accept it on your phone by
selecting Yes.
Note: Files sent using Bluetooth will
be saved to the phone memory.
2 Follow the instructions that came
with your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair your
devices.
3 Your GU285 will then
automatically connect to your
Bluetooth headset and switch to
headset profile.
61
Connectivity
Sending and receiving your
files using Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on if
Bluetooth is a great way to send and
receive files as no wires are needed
and connection is quick and easy.
You can also connect to a Bluetooth
headset to make and receive calls.
4 Your GU285 will automatically
Before you can start sharing files
using Bluetooth, you will need to pair
your phone with another Bluetooth
device. For information on pairing
devices, see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device.
To switch Bluetooth on:
it is not already activated.
search for other Bluetooth enabled
devices within range.
5 Choose the device you want to
send the file to and select Send.
To receive a file:
1 To receive files, your Bluetooth
must be both Turn on and
Visible.
2 A message will prompt you to
accept the file from the sender.
Select Yes to receive the file.
1 Select Connectivity, then choose
Bluetooth.
2 Select Turn on.
3 Select Turn off to switch
Bluetooth off.
To send a file:
1 Open the file you want to send,
typically this will be a photo, video
or music file.
2 Select Options and choose Send
via, then Bluetooth.
62
LG GU285 | User Guide
TIP! Keep an eye on the progress bar
to make sure your file is sent.
Note The Bluetooth® word mark and
logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and any use of such marks by
LG Electronics is under licence. Other
trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
USB connection mode
1 Attach the USB cable to the
You can select the USB connection
mode on your phone for several uses.
2 Select Mass storage from the
Always ask mode
If you set the “Ask always” as default,
the phone will always prompt you
to select a type of USB connection
mode each time you connect the
phone to a PC via the data cable. If
you disable the “Ask always”, the
connection mode will be the one you
have manually set in Menu - Settings
- Connectivity - USB Connection and
one of the options Internet, Mass
storage, PC Suite, or Music sync.
Mass storage-Use your
phone as a mass storage
device
device.
popup menu in the device.
3 A removable disk folder will open
automatically on your computer,
two if you have a memory card
inserted, showing all the folders
on your phone or memory card.
4 Drag and drop your photos,
videos, music or documents into
the correct folders.
5 Safely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely remove
hardware icon in your desktop
toolbar.
Note : This function is not available
for Macintosh computer
Your GU285 can be used as a mass
storage device, just like a USB stick.
This is a great way of moving your
files from your computer to your
phone. If you’ve inserted a memory
card, when connecting as Mass
storage, the phone will be displayed
and external memory.
63
Connectivity
PC suite-Synchronise your
phone with your PC
You can synchronise your phone
with your PC to make sure all your
important details and dates match,
but also to backup your files to put
your mind at ease.
Installing LG PC Suite on your
computer
1 Go to www.lgmobile.com and
choose Middle East first and then
your country.
2 Select Manual & Software and
click LG Mobile Support Tool
application to download manual
and software Click Yes andLG PC
Suite installer will then appear.
(Windows XP, Windows Media
Player and more).
3 Select the language you would like
the installer to run in and click OK.
4 Follow the instructions on screen
to complete the LG PC Suite
Installer wizard.
5 Once installation is complete, the
LG PC Suite icon will appear on
your desktop.
Connecting your phone and PC
1 Connect the USB cable to your
phone and your PC.
2 Select PC Suit from the popup
menu in the device.
3 Double click on the LG PC Suite
icon on your desktop.
4 Click on Connection Wizard, then
USB.
5 Click on Next, then Next again,
then Finish. Your phone and PC
are now connected.
Backing up and restoring your
phone’s information
1 Attach the USB cable to the device
and select the PC Suite on the
screen.
2 Click on the Backup icon, and
select Backup or Restore.
3 Mark the contents you would
like to back up or restore. Select
the location you would like to
64
LG GU285 | User Guide
backup information to, or restore
information from. Click OK.
4 Your information will be backed
up.
Viewing your phone files on
your PC
1 Attach the USB cable to the device
and select the PC Suite on the
screen.
2 Click on the Contents icon.
3 All of the documents, flash
contents, images, sounds and
videos you have saved onto your
phone will be displayed on the
screen in the LG Phone folder.
TIP! Viewing the contents of your
phone on your PC helps you to arrange
files, organise documents and remove
contents you no longer need.
Synchronising your contacts
1 Attach the USB cable to the device
and select the PC Suite on the
phone screen.
2 Click on the Contacts icon.
3 Your PC will now import and
display all contacts saved to your
USIM card and handset.
4 Click on File and select Save. You
can now select where you would
like to save your contacts to.
Note To backup contacts saved to
your USIM card, click on the SIM
card folder on the left side of your PC
screen. Select Edit at the top of the
screen, then Select all. Right-click your
contacts and select Copy to contact.
Now click on the Handset folder on
the left of your screen and all your
numbers will be displayed.
65
Connectivity
Synchronising your messages
1 Attach the USB cable to the device
and select the PC Suite on the
screen.
2 Click on the Messages icon.
3 All of your PC and phone
messages will be displayed in
folders on your screen.
4 Use the tool bar at the top of
your screen to edit and rearrange
messages.
Phone Software update
LG Mobile Phone Software
upgrade on web site
For more information and using this
function, Please visit LGmobile.com
site path: http://www.lgmobile.com
- select country - Manual & software
banner
This Feature allows you to upgrade
your software to the latest version
and conveniently on the internet
without needing to visit our service
center.
66
LG GU285 | User Guide
As the mobile phone software
upgrade requires the user’s full
attention for the duration of the
upgrade process, please be
sure to check any instructions
and notes that appear at each
step before proceeding. Please
note that removing the USB data
communication cable or battery
during the upgrade may seriously
damage your mobile phone. To
the extent permitted by law, the
manufacturer takes no responsibility
for loss of data during the upgrade
process. You are advised to back up
any important information in advance
for safekeeping as the software
upgrade could result in the deletion
of personal data.
Accessories
These accessories were supplied with your GU285.
Charger
User Guide
Learn more about your GU285.
Battery
Stereo
headset
Note
• Always use genuine LG accessories.
Failure to do this may invalidate
your warranty.
• Accessories may be different in
different regions; please check with
our regional service company or
agent for further inquires.
67
Technical data
General
Product name : GU285
System : GSM850 / E-GSM900 / DCS1800 / PCS1900 / WCDMA
Ambient Temperatures
Max : +55°C (discharging) +45°C (charging)
Min : -10°C
68
LG GU285 | User Guide
MEMO
MEMO
MEMO
MEMO
MEMO
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising